TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
(Rear Doors) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
(Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
2
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
knob push button has returned to the out position. Turn
the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the key and
cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
2
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Position
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
2
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Replacement Keys
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Sentry Key Programming
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
2
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
General Information
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and the brake pedal
is depressed.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
2
CAUTION!
Door Lock Plunger
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
switch to lock or unlock the doors.
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
Power Door Lock Switch
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
2
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
features in accordance with local laws.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors have the “child-protection” door
lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control UP to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (SEDAN)
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
2
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Three Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
minimum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following
steps:
2
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
dure.
To lock the doors and liftgate (if equipped with
power options) :
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles re-
fer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ЉPersonal Set-
tingsЉ in the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC -
equipped vehicles perform the following steps:
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec-
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all
other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have
to reprogram them for your vehicle.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
2
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
11. A single chime will be heard.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (CONVERTIBLE)
2
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Four Button Transmitter
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
open the deck lid from distances of 23–50 feet (7–15
meters) using a transmitter. You don’t have to point the
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
transmitter at the vehicle to activate the system. Each
vehicle comes with two transmitters.
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
To Unlock the Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
2
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
dure.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Unlatch the Deck Lid
Press the “Rear Release” button twice to unlatch the deck
lid.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps
With Lock” feature can be turned on or off. On electronic
vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped vehicles re-
fer to “Personal Settings” in the “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” section of this manual. On
non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the following
steps:
Panic Alarm
The panic mode flashes the park lights, and sounds the
horn for about 3 minutes or until the alarm is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm:
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
NOTE: The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ЉPersonal SettingsЉ in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec-
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
vehicle including any transmitters that are currently
programmed.
2
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
2. Enter Program Mode: Turn the ignition to the ON
position, and using a currently programmed transmitter;
press and hold the ЉUnlockЉ button on the transmitter.
Continue to hold the “Unlock” button, wait at least 4 but
no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
PANIC button for at least 1 second. Release both buttons
simultaneously.
To Program Additional Transmitters
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, the transmitters may also be programmed
through the EVIC display.
3. Program Each Transmitter: All transmitters to be used
Up to 8 transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle.
To obtain additional transmitters, contact your autho-
rized dealer. To program a transmitter (within 23–50 feet
(7–15 meters) of the vehicle), perform the following
procedure:
with your vehicle must be programmed as follows:
Press and release the ЉLockЉ and ЉUnlockЉ buttons simul-
taneously, followed by a press and release of ANY button
on each transmitter to be programmed. You will hear a
chime when a transmitter has been successfully pro-
grammed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
Transmitter Battery Service
This transmitter complies with FCC rules part 15 and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
The recommended replacement battery is the Panasonic
CR2032 or equivalent.
1. Pry the transmitter halves apart with a dime or similar
object. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket
material during removal.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Separating Transmitter Halves
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off
immediately.
2
To set the alarm:
3. Reassemble the transmitter case. Snap the halves
together and test transmitter operation.
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all
doors.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door/liftgate using the Keyless Entry
Transmitter.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
ing.
Door Lock Plunger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
LIFTGATE (SEDAN)
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate (if
equipped). Rotate the key and pull the liftgate up.
2
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right. If equipped, the liftgate can also be
unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activating
the power door lock switches located on the front doors.
The central locking/unlocking feature (if equipped) can
also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release touch pad located on the backside of the
liftgate handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion (if equipped).
Liftgate Handle
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction, or the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right. Using the
liftgate handle, pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DECK LID (CONVERTIBLE)
WARNING!
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the deck lid.
To open the deck lid, insert the key into the lock and turn
to the right. The deck lid can also be opened using the
remote keyless entry or by using the power deck lid
release switch located in the glove box.
•
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
•
•
Driving with the deck lid open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the deck lid closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the deck lid
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and
the climate control blower switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Gas props support the deck lid in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the deck lid in cold weather.
EMERGENCY SEAT BACK RELEASE (SEDAN)
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Power Deck Lid Release (Convertible)
You can open the deck lid by pressing the Remote
Keyless Entry Button or from inside the vehicle, using the
switch located inside the glove box. On vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the power deck
lid release switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or if
vehicle speed exceeds 0 mph (0 km/h), or when the
clutch pedal is depressed. On vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission, the power deck lid release
switch is disabled if the doors are locked, or the trans-
mission is out of PARK.
As a security measure, a Seat Back Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seat back latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat back can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seat back
latching mechanism.
Once unlatched the seat back can be pushed forward to
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the seat
back may not operate properly.
Emergency Seat Back Release
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
EMERGENCY DECK LID RELEASE LATCH
(CONVERTIBLE)
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-
the-dark lever attached to the deck lid latching mecha-
nism. See following picture.
2
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
deck lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
As a security measure, an emergency deck lid release
lever is built into the deck lid latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
Emergency Deck Lid Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger’s
window and the lower right switch controls the right rear
passenger’s window.
The sedan has a window lock switch, located between the
window switches allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.
Power Window Switches
The convertible has an ЉAll windows upЉ and ЉAll
windows down,Љ switch located between the window
switches instead of the lock switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Rear Window Switches
There are also rear passenger window switches (sedan
only) located at the rear of the center console.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
2
Auto Down Feature
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an auto down feature. Press the window switch past
the detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. Press the switch a second time in either direc-
tion to stop the window.
Power Rear WIndow Switches Sedans
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (SEDAN)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
If the belt webbing is twisted, and comes in contact with
the wearers body, the twisted belt should be corrected
using the Lap/Shoulder belt untwisting procedure found
in this section.
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
2
Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
2
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seat back is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seat back is not fully latched.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in
the fully upright and locked position when occu-
pied. If the rear seat back is not fully upright and
locked and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be
pulled out of the retractor, the vehicle should imme-
diately be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt can not be pulled
out, check that the rear seat back is fully latched.
•
If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still can not be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
2
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
2
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
ЉOccupant Classification SystemЉ in this section).
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
2
•
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
“childЉ category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even
a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to ЉOccupant Classification SystemЉ
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
2
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accomodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ЉIf
You Need AssistanceЉ in Section 9 of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbag system consists of the following:
•
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped)
Airbag Warning Light
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
−
−
−
Occupant Classification Module
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
Weight Sensors
Driver Airbag
Passenger Airbag
How The Airbag System Works
Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
Front Acceleration Sensors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
2
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
the ignition is first turned on. After the self-
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ЉPassen-
ger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator LightЉ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small
adult.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
•
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push-
ing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
•
The PAD indictor light should not be illumi-
nated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. In this
case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if a
collision requiring an airbag occurs.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
tor lamp illuminates the words ЉPASS AIR BAG OFFЉ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
Passenger Air-
Front Passenger
bag Disable
Airbag Status
Seat Occupant (PAD) Indicator
Light
2
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
Adult
Child
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
WARNING!
Empty or Very
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing
infant seat.
OFF*
OFF
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
2
•
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat Mounted Side Airbags
(If equipped) are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
•
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat-
able Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best inter-
action with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds,
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbag moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force, that it could
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain air bags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
2
•
•
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
•
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
2
•
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag
may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
•
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right front
passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classifi-
cation System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This
could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate
any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters/ driver inflatable
knee blocker.
•
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure
to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
•
•
The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
2
•
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Seatbelt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)
Cruise control status
2. Used in defense of litigation involving
DaimlerChrysler product
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Traction/stability control status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
WARNING!
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
2
•
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
NOTE: For additional information refer to www.nhtsa-
.dot.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
2
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in this
section.
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
•
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to, Installing the Child Restraint System for
typical installation instructions.
2
Lower Anchorages Wires
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
2
Tether Strap Mounting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS (CONVERTIBLE)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
2
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
If the belt webbing is twisted, and comes in contact with
the wearers body, the twisted belt should be corrected
using the Lap/Shoulder belt untwisting procedure found
in this section.
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
WARNING!
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
2
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn
under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoul-
der so that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
Latch Plate To Buckle
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
2
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
Seat Belt Webbing Guide
NOTE: The manufacturer recommends that the seat belt
is routed through the seat belt webbing guide when
using the seat belt.
The seat belt webbing guide should be used to improve
seat belt accessibility. The seat belt can be removed from
the guide to allow for easier access to the rear seats.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Seat Belt Webbing Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the
driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt. The
driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert)
will be reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat
belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
ЉOccupant Classification SystemЉ in this section).
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You
may damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are in-
flating.
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
2
•
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
“child” category. This could be a child, a teenager, or
even a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to ЉOccupant Classification SystemЉ
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
2
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accomodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under
؆If You Need Assistance؆ in Section 9 of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbag system consists of the following:
•
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
Airbag Warning Light
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
−
−
−
Occupant Classification Module
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
Weight Sensors
Driver Airbag
Passenger Airbag
How The Airbag System Works
Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
Interconnecting Wiring
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
Front Acceleration Sensors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
2
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small
adult.
the ignition is first turned on. After the self-
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ЉPassen-
ger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator LightЉ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push-
ing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
•
The PAD indictor light should not be illumi-
nated when teenagers, most children in a
forward facing child restraint or booster
seats, most children that can properly wear
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
tor lamp illuminates the words ЉPASS AIR BAG OFFЉ
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
the vehicle’s seat belt, and when an adult passenger is
properly seated in the front passenger seat. In this
case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if a collision
requiring an airbag occurs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
Passenger Air-
Front Passenger
bag Disable
Airbag Status
Seat Occupant (PAD) Indicator
Light
2
NOTE: Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
Adult
Child
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
WARNING!
Empty or Very
Small Objects
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing
infant seat.
OFF*
OFF
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
2
•
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat Mounted Side Airbags
(If equipped) are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions. The ORC module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The side airbag control module will not detect
roll over, front or rear collisions.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON positions. These include all of
the items previously mentioned.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbag moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force, that it could
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
only about half of the time it takes you to blink your
eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect
the driver’s knees.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates
rearward towards the driver’s knees to help protect
the knees and position you for the best interaction
with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this is
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
•
•
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
2
•
•
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
2
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag
may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag
system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
•
•
The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an airbag deployment, your vehicle is
designed to record up to 2-seconds of specific vehicle
data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment. Please note
that such data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
and are otherwise unavailable. In conjunction with other
•
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the right front
passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classifi-
cation System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant. This
could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate
any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters/ driver inflatable
knee blocker.
•
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure
to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
data gathered during a complete accident investigation,
the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler and
others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes
and associated injuries in order to assess and improve
vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations
initiated by DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be
requested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
2. Used in defense of litigation involving
DaimlerChrysler product
a
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
2
•
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Seatbelt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)
Cruise control status
Traction/stability control status
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
•
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
2
•
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
NOTE: For additional information refer to www.nhtsa-
.dot.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with seat belt
retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking
mode, which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the
latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is
all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
into the retractor, as the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates that the seat belt is now in
the automatic locking mode. Pull on the excess webbing
to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Follow
the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
2
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. Both rear seating positions
have exclusive lower anchorages located at the rear of the
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat cushion. They are round bars, part of the seat and
body structure, and are readily visible. In addition, there
are two tether strap anchorages located behind the rear
seat head form, in the convertible top storage area.
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
Latch Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
2
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed over the center of the
head form and attached to the tether anchor, located
behind the rear seat head form, in the convertible top
storage area. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To gain access to the achorages, locate the child
tether anchorage decals on the carpet behind the rear seat
head forms and use a small screwdriver to pry the carpet
flap open. The carpet flap is attached in two different
places.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
Tether Strap Mounting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
2
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Seat Belts
2
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
CONVERTIBLE TOP OPERATION
To Lower The Top:
NOTE: Thoroughly dry the convertible top and top
storage area, prior to leaving the top lowered for an
extended period of time. This will help prevent possible
mildew build-up.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does, and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection
of the occupants of a vehicle in a collision. Therefore
it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts
at all times when riding in a convertible. Studies
have shown that it is generally safer to remain inside
a vehicle during a collision, than to be ejected from
the vehicle.
3
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the convertible top or its com-
ponents, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
mph (16 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear
selector in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or
in the Neutral position (manual transaxle) before
lowering or raising the top.
To avoid damage to either the top or the rear win-
dow, check the top storage area at the rear of the
vehicle interior to be sure that it is clear of debris or
other items. Be sure that child seat flip up bars are
lowered. Do not use the top storage area for other
storage purposes.
NOTE: When closing the convertible top all windows
will drop slightly from the full up position.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the convertible top with ice or snow
build-up on the top. Damage to the top may occur.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Release the top from the windshield header by pulling
down on the latch handle and turning the latch handle
clockwise until it stops.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
the Power Top Switch lightly in the first detent position
will lower the windows slightly and the convertible top
to the full down position. Pressing and holding the
switch in the second detent position will lower all four
windows completely and the top to the full down posi-
tion.
3
Releasing Convertible Top Latches
3. Press the Power Top Switch to lower the top just
enough to disengage the top pins from the header, turn
the handle counterclockwise and raise the handle to the
stowed position.
NOTE: The Power Top Switch has two detent positions
for lowering the convertible top. Pressing and holding
Convertible Top Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Continue pressing the Power Top Switch until the
convertible top is lowered completely.
To Raise The Top:
5. Install the Convertible Top Boot Cover, if equipped.
Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped, in this section.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the convertible top or its com-
ponents, your vehicle is equipped with a feature that
prevents convertible top operation at speeds over 10
mph (16 km/h).
CAUTION!
Damage to the convertible top boot cover could
result if the latch handle is not completely closed
when the top is lowered. The convertible top boot
cover cannot be installed while the latch handle is
open.
CAUTION!
To fully insure that no damage occurs, be sure that
the vehicle is at a complete stop with the gear
selector in the Park position (automatic transaxle) or
in the Neutral position (manual transaxle) before
lowering or raising the top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
1. Remove the convertible top boot cover, if equipped.
Refer to Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and Stor-
age, in this section.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
3
3. Press the Power Top Switch to raise the top. Before the
top reaches the windshield, open the latch handle and
turn the handle clockwise to open the latches. Press the
switch again to continue raising the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
NOTE: If the top is not latched right away, it may be
necessary to press the power top switch, “UP” or
“DOWN” quickly, to align the pins to the windshield
header.
Engaging Convertible Top Latches
5. Raise the latch handle into the stowed position.
4. Pull down on the latch handle and rotate it counter-
clockwise to engage the latches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Car top carriers, ski racks, etc., should not be at-
tached to the convertible top mechanism as they will
damage the top. Do not place objects on the convert-
ible top, in the top well or on the sport bar. Damage
to the convertible top may occur.
Convertible Top Boot Cover Installation–If
Equipped
1. With the top down and the convertible top latch
handle in the stowed position, lay the unfolded boot
cover across the convertible top.
Convertible Top Latch Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
2. Install the rear edge of the boot, first tucking the rear
edge of the boot under the rear and both sides of the rails.
3
Boot Laying Across Convertible Top
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the right and left boot arms forward and engage
both boot arm snaps. Make sure both snaps are fully
engaged.
Tucking Boot Under Rail
Engaging Boot Arm Snaps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
4. Engage the boot center section retainer using the tabs
provided.
5. Tuck the rear flap of the boot in behind the Upper
Moulding.
3
Engaging Boot Center Section
Tucking In Rear Flap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Convertible Top Boot Cover Removal and
Storage
1. Unsnap the snaps and remove the top cover boot.
2. Lay the boot cover flat with the center section retainer
facing the rear of the car.
Boot Removed And Laying Flat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3. First fold the left side of the boot cover to the middle
of the boot cover.
3
Folding Boot Cover Right Side
CAUTION!
Folding Boot Cover Left Side
4. Second fold the right side of the boot cover to the
middle, fitting it inside the left side of the boot cover and
store it in the trunk or a dry secure area.
Do not lay heavy objects on top of the boot or lay the
boot on top of sharp/pointy objects. Damage could
occur to the boot.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE
If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
Bleeder Screw
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.
7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches.
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches.
3
NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can
cause convertible top operating concerns.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Engaging Convertible Top Latches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the
left (L), center (O) or Right (R) position. After selecting
the mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want
the mirror to move. Use the center (O) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
3
Power Mirror Switch
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable
when the vehicle alarm is enabled.
NOTE: The passenger vanity mirror will become inop-
erable if left on for more than 10 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ or ЉDial”
ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
3
UConnect™ Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ЉSetupЉ and then
ЉPhone Pairing,Љ the following compound command
can be said: ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID on
certain radios.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ЉPhonebook New Entry,Љ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Entry.Љ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
ЉCancelЉ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
3
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options are at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ follow-
ing the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play
all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
•
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
www.jeep.com/uconnect
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ЉAdvanced Phone
ConnectivityЉ).
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone PairingЉ and follow the audible prompts.
•
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ЉPair a
PhoneЉ and follow the audible prompts.
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ЉJohn Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ЉAdd Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,Љ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉDial.Љ
3
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
•
For example, you can say Љ234-567-8901.Љ
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.Љ
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ЉRobert SmithЉ or ЉRobertЉ
instead of ЉBob.Љ
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
ЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ or ЉPagerЉ). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Edit.Љ
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
•
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Delete.Љ
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉList
NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ЉVoice RecognitionЉ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ЉDelete.Љ
3
ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ЉPhonebook EditЉ feature.
•
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
To call one of the names in the list, press the ЉVoice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ЉCall.Љ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ operations at this point.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook List Names.Љ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉDialЉ or
ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ЉToggling Between Calls.Љ To combine two calls, refer
to ЉConference Call.Љ
3
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The
UConnect™ system compatible phones in market today
do not support rejecting an incoming call when another
call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only either
answer an incoming call or ignore it.
To put a call on hold, press the ЈPhone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ЈPhone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ЈPhone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Redial
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉRedial.Љ
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ЉMaking a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.Љ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
3
•
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Emergency Assistance
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
emergency situations when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
If you need towing assistance,
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉEmergencyЉ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉTowing Assistance.Љ
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Paging
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ЉSend.Љ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSendЉ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
To learn how to page, refer to ЉWorking with Automated
Systems.Љ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
3
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ЉWorking
with Automated Systems.Љ
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,Љ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ЉPair a PhoneЉ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
Information Service
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number Љ#121,Љ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
3
•
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute.Љ
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ЉTransfer Call.Љ
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉMute-off.Љ
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ
with one electronic device at a time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Select PhoneЉ and follow the prompts.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
•
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
•
When prompted, say ЉList Phones.Љ
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ЈVoice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
3
Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉSetup,
Voice TrainingЉ command.
•
•
At the next prompt, say ЉDeleteЉ and follow the
prompts.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Љsend.Љ
•
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
•
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
Performance is maximized under:
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
•
You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) for Љ0Љ (zero). Љ800Љ must be
spoken Љeight-zero-zero.Љ
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Far End Audio Performance
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth Communication Link
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ЉonЉ mode.
3
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows, and
dry weather condition.
Operation from driver seat.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
North American English
Alternate(s)
Primary
Phone pairing
Phonebook
Pairing
Phone book
Return to main menu
Select phone
Set up
Return. Main menu
select
Phone settings phone set
up
3
SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment
Manual Adjustment Bar
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
WARNING!
•
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
6 - Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
Power Seat Switch
Recliner Control Lever
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward
slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Lumbar—If Equipped
Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.
The Lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
the driver’s seat. To increase support, rotate the handle
down.
To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Lumbar Adjust Handle
Folding Seat Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt—If Equipped
How to operate the driver’s seat:
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
2. Push the seat back forward.
3
3. To return seat to a sitting position, push seat back
rearward.
NOTE: The driver’s front seat has a full recliner
memory, which will allow the seat back to return to its
original position.
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt Lever
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System)
(Convertible)
How to operate the passenger front seat:
1. Push the lever down until seat back releases.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push seat back forward until it slides toward the
dashboard.
4. Push seat rearward until the track locks.
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a full recliner
memory, which will allow the seat back to returned to its
original position.
NOTE: The passenger front seat has a track memory,
which returns the seat to just past the half way point of
the track regardless of original position.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
and push down on the head restraint.
Passenger Seat Back Tilt Lever
3. To return seat to a sitting position, rotate seat back
upright until it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
3
Adjustable Head Restraints
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s
seats. The control for the heater is located on the instru-
ment panel, below the radio. After turning on the igni-
tion, you may choose OFF, HIGH, or LOW heat settings.
An indicator on the switch shows which setting has been
chosen.
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illu-
minated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after about 30 minutes of continuous op-
eration.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within 2 to 3 minutes.
Heated Seat Switches
Pressing the switch once will select high-level
heating. Pressing the switch a second time will
select low-level heating. Pressing the switch a
third time will shut the heating elements off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan)
WARNING!
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Push and hold the buttons shown in
the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
3
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE:
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
•
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
Folding Rear Seat Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly check
and see if the Automatic Locking retractor (ALR)
system is activated.
Folding Rear Seat (Convertible)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. The seat back release knobs are
located in the trunk area. Pull the left side seatback
release knob to fold down the left side seatback. Pull the
right side seatback release knob to fold down the right
side seatback.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
3
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright
position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan)
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.
•
Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
CAUTION!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
Folding Rear Seat Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
•
Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
3
Tumbling Seat Strap
To return the rear seat to it’s upright latched position,
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
•
Attach the elastic strap, located at the base of the seat
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to
hold the seat in place.
NOTE: The elastic strap should be reinstalled in the clip
on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat
to its normal position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tumbling Rear Seat (Convertible)
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
tumbled forward.
To tumble the seat forward use the following procedure:
1. The seat back release knobs are located in the trunk
area. Pull the left side seatback release knob to fold down
the left side seatback. Pull the right side seatback release
knob to fold down the right side seatback.
CAUTION!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
Folding Rear Seat Release Knobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
2. From inside the vehicle, fold the rear seat back down
flat.
3. Pull the release handle located at the bottom of the
folded seat back and tumble the seat forward.
3
Folding Rear Seat Back
Tumbling Rear Seat
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the cinching tether strap, located at the side of
the seat cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim
panel and tighten by pulling the cinching strap until the
seat is secure.
To return the tumbling rear seat to the latched (normal)
position use the following procedure:
1. Loosen the strap by pushing rearward on the cinching
tether strap buckle.
Cinching Tether Strap
Releasing Cinching Tether Strap
2. Disconnect the cinching tether strap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: The strap should be reinstalled in the side
pocket on the seat cushion before returning the seat to the
latched (normal) position.
NOTE: Prior to lifting either seatback to the upright
position, be sure that the seat belt is brought forward to
avoid trapping it behind the seatback.
NOTE: Prior to rotating the seat cushions rearward, be
sure that the rear seat belt buckles are secured with the
straps, so that the buckles are accessible.
3. Rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat.
Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
3
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Rear Seat Belt Buckle Straps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Removal (Sedan)
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo
space.
•
Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
•
Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
•
Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the
floor attachments.
Folding Rear Seat Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seat back to its upright latched
position.
3
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Lever Location
•
Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and slightly to the right, and
raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Release Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
3
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights (Sedan)
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Map/Reading Lights (Convertible)
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, these
lights, located under the rearview mirror can be turned
on by switches located at the base of the rearview mirror.
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
3
Dimmer Control
Headlamp Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: On this vehicle, the daytime running light will
automatically turn off when the turn signal is in opera-
tion and automatically turn back on when the turn signal
is not operating.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lamp Control
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Turn Signals
3
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the
control to select the desired wiper speed.
Highbeam, Lowbeam, and Passing Lights
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
3
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is
left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Wiper/Washer Switch
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
WARNING!
Rotate the control to the second detent for Low speed
wiper operation, or to the third detent for High speed
operation
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
ЉParkЉ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
TILT STEERING COLUMN
WARNING!
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the
multifunction control lever and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Pull the lever back up to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
3
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED
The traction control indicator, located in the
instrument cluster, will flash when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is in use.
The TCS switch is located on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Tilt Steering Column Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, press the TCS switch until the
traction control indicator in the instrument cluster lights
up.
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the traction control indicator turns OFF.
NOTE: The traction control indicator will illuminate
momentarily as a bulb check, each time the ignition
switch is turned ON. This will occur even if you used the
TCS switch to turn the system OFF.
NOTE: The Traction Control System will make buzzing
or clicking sounds when the system is in operation.
Traction Control Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
3
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Speed Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed:
To Resume Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
While in the AutoStick mode, speed control will only
operate in third and fourth gear.
To Deactivate:
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 2 mph
(3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
Manual Transaxle:
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
3
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The HomeLink system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Prearmed,
Armed or Alarming state. The HomeLink system will
only operate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped)
is in the Disarmed mode.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
HomeLink Buttons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
3
HomeLink Buttons (Convertible)
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
1. Turn off the engine.
WARNING!
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
3
HomeLink Programming (Convertible)
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
Proper Transceiver Training Distance
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the Uni-
versal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held
transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call
toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
•
•
Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer-
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
3
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-
gramming.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held trans-
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash.
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
Power Sunroof Switch
Turn the Ignition Key to the ACC or ON position, press
and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express Open Feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Wind Buffeting
WARNING!
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
3
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
It will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of the
optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating ele-
ment of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only when the
switch is in the ЉONЉ or ЉACCESSORYЉ positions.
The outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key
symbol or battery symbol, indicating power source. All
outlets are protected by a single 20 Amp fuse.
The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console
is a conventional cigar lighter outlet.
There are two optional power outlets. One is in the center
console/armrest lower storage bin.
Front Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3
Center Console Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
This outlet is powered directly by the battery, regardless
of the ignition switch position. All accessories connected
to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use, to protect the battery against
discharge.
This outlet is powered directly by the battery (as an option,
fuse #11 in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), may be
repositioned to allow power to come from the ignition
switch only when in the ЉONЉ or ЉACCESSORYЉ positions).
NOTE: Neither of the power outlets will accept a cigar
The second is in the right rear cargo area.
lighter unit. They are intended only for accessory usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cup holders, a removable coin
holder, 12 volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cup holders; one is molded in
the center of the console to hold large cups and the others
are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in the
rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also operate
a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an
optional Smoker’s Package).
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
STORAGE
CAUTION!
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
•
Many accessories that can be plugged into the 12
volt power outlet, draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use; i.e. cellular phones,
etc. Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent engine start-
ing.
3
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power such as cool-
ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc., will discharge
the battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started,
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow
the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Sliding Armrest
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two
unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is a slot for a power cord, an area
to store a cell phone, and other miscellaneous items. Push
the lower button on the front of the armrest, and raise the
armrest for access to the lower storage bin. The lower
storage has a power outlet (if equipped), a slot for a
power cord, and can be used for storing up to six CD’s
and other miscellaneous items.
Sliding Armrest Storage Bins
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Storage Pockets
There are also Storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
REAR SHELF PANEL— IF EQUIPPED
The rear shelf panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
3
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
•
•
To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top).
In an accident objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Position 2 (Middle)
WARNING!
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
3
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Position 4 (Vertical)
WARNING!
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it into place.
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in
the cargo area when the seatbacks folded down. In
an accident objects could strike the seatbacks or
occupants causing serious or fatal injury.
Position 5 (table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top
rear guides. Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into
place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.
3
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
WARNING!
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE: When the luggage rack is not in use, place the
crossbars together at the rear of the vehicle. In this
position they are designed to improve the vehicle aero-
dynamics and reduce wind noise.
Use both adjustable crossbars assemblies to support the
load and distribute the load as evenly as possible.
To adjust the crossbars with latch style releases, release
the latches on the inboard side of the crossbar supports
on each side of the vehicle, then move the crossbars to the
desired position. Once the crossbar is in the desired
position, return both latches to the locked position.
To adjust the crossbars with botton style releases, depress
the button and slide the crossbar to the next locking
position. Alternate sides until the crossbars are posi-
tioned correctly for your cargo and the stanchions are
locked square to the slide rails.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack “Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
3
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading below the red area of the
gauge shows that the engine cooling system is
operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
5. Tachometer
“hATCh”, and “gATE” will only be displayed in the
EVIC display. For additional information, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in
Section 3.
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
6. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
4
7. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/deck/hatch/gate ajar and loose
gas cap. Loose gas cap will be displayed from the
Odometer/Trip Odometer on all models.
8. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON. (See page 187 for more informa-
tion.)
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, all warnings including “door”, “dECK”,
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
Speed Control System is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. Malfunction Indicator Light
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs. (See page 360 for more
information.)
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condi-
tion checked promptly.
10. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
NOTE: Turn signal bulbs are located in the Instrument
Panel. (See page 181 for more information.)
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
11. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped. (See page 298 for more information.)
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
12. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, there
is a low brake fluid level or there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
14. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
15. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, it means that there is a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
16. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed. (See page 35
for more information.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
17. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
18. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
19. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
(See page 180 for more information.)
4
20. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on
while driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer. (See page 101 for more information.)
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Oil Pressure Light
23. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display—If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages. (See page 227 for more information.)
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
24. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7. (See page 363 for more information.)
25. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
22. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
EVIC functions. (See page 227 for more information.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)–If Equipped
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System Status
Vehicle information warning message displays
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
Compass heading
Outside temperature display
4
Trip computer functions
UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — If Equipped
•
Audio mode display
EVIC Location
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem-
perature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
•
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
•
•
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
•
•
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Headlamps On
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
Key In Ignition
•
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmissions).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
EVIC Functions
•
•
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Elapsed Time
Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will
only occur if a resettable function is currently being
displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within 3 seconds
of resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL
will be displayed during this 3 second window).
4
EVIC Button
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
•
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Average Fuel Economy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
in this section.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
Average Fuel Economy
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text
display of ЉLOW FUELЉ. This display will continue until
the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the ЉLOW FUELЉ text
and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the
current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel
tank level.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from where it was before the reset.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Elapsed Time
Language
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-
ing on availability. As you continue the displayed infor-
mation will be shown in the selected language.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
4
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
is displayed in the EVIC.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Unlock On Exit
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
(automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC but-
ton when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv-
er’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST” or “ALL
DOORS” appears to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“Off”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
4
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the com-
pass variance should be properly set according to the
compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Instrument Panel. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
To set the variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one seconds) press
and release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and
release (less than one seconds) the EVIC button several
times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted. The
“Compass Variance” message and the current variance
zone number will be displayed. To change the zone, press
and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
with individual long (longer than two seconds) EVIC
button presses for each increment, until the desired
variance is achieved. To exit the Variance Programming,
press the EVIC button with a short (less than one second)
button press.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrat-
ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
4
To manually calibrate the Compass: start the engine and
leave the transmission in the PARK position. With a short
button press (less than one second) press and release the
EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
menu. Once in the Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features) menu, press and release (less than one
second) the EVIC button several times until “Calibrate
Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A long (longer than two
seconds) EVIC button Press will place the Compass in
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
calibration mode. The Cal indicator will come on con-
tinuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the com-
pass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle
can now be driven to calibrate. (A short EVIC button
press from the ЉCalibrate Compass (Yes)Љ screen will exit
the EVIC Customer Programmable features, and return it
to its normal operating mode). To complete the compass
calibration, drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360
degree circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
power lines, large metallic objects, until the CAL indica-
tor turns off. The compass will now function normally.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first and then
quicker the longer the button is held.
Setting The Analog Clock
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
AM Reception
4
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Two Types of Signals
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
REF Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
4
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
•
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
4
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
4
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RAQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
4
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
4
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
16 Digit-Character
Program Type
Display
No program type or un-
None
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious_Music
Religious_Talk
Rock
defined
Adult Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Adult_Hits
Alert Alert
Classical
Soft
Soft
Classic Rock
College
Classic_Rock
College
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft_Rock
Soft_R_&_B
Sports
Talk
Top_40
Weather
Country
Country
Emergency Test
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
Emergency Test
Foreign_Language
Information
Jazz
Talk
Top 40
Weather
News
News
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
4
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ЉLOAD DISCЉ insert the
CD into the player.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ЉMUTEЉ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
4
Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
ЉINSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
played.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
4
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
•
Maximum number of files: 255
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Maximum number of folders: 100
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
Playback of MP3 Files
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
4
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
Radio display will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
ЉINSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ЉLOAD DISCЉ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc
is loading.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
Љelapsed timeЉ priority mode.
4
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
System Activation
Equipped)
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
4
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ЉSATЉ
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ЉSATЉ
appears in the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ
button a second time to stop the search.
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls are as follows:
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you
Fan Control
to choose from several pat-
terns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the OFF position.
control is to
a
particular
mode, the more air distribu-
tion you receive from that
mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
Floor
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the fan switch is not in the A/C position. This dehumidi-
fies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel
economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
4
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
Air Conditioning
Use this control to regulate
Use this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Con-
ditioning System is engaged
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler tem-
peratures while the red area
indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Circulation Control
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Use this button to choose be-
tween outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
minate when you are in recir-
culate mode. Only use the re-
circulate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid
weather.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
4
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Window Fogging
Summer Operation
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/C, PANEL and blower controls. Direct the panel
outlets toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate
without A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by using the defrost position.
Outside Air Intake
4
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
ing on the inside surface of the glass
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Rear Defroster Switch
The push-button is located at the center of the
instrument panel, below the radio. Press this but-
ton to turn on the rear window defroster, and the
optional electric remote control heated mirrors. An amber
light shows that the defroster is on.
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 10
minutes of operation. Each following activation of the
defroster will last for five minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
4
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch — If Equipped
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
Rear Wiper Switch
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inad-
vertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause exces-
sive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in over-
heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Manual Transaxle
WARNING!
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
started within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator
pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal
starting procedure.
5
Extremely Cold Weather (below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails to Start
CAUTION!
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
WARNING!
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after severe operation
allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
temperature.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
The following chart should be used as a guide in deter-
minning the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
TURBOCHARGER ؆COOL DOWN؆ CHART
Driving Conditions Idle Time (in minutes) Before Shut Down
Normal Driving
Aggressive Driving or Heavily Loaded
Trailer Tow
Not required.
3
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
5
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of Park.
•
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
PARK, without depressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
obtain service as soon as possible.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ACC or ON positions, and the brake pedal
is depressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of
PARK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
Turn the Key to OFF then restart the engine.
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat-
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci-
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
Shift into D and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
Reset Mode
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral
(N) will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
service without damaging the transaxle.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
5
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic
Transaxle
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector
in P (Park) position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
•
When shifting into P (Park), depress the button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
•
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
When engaged in P (Park), you will not be able to
move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift
lever button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing trailers), use
the “3” range.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-
wise, damage to the steering column or shifter could
result.
“3” Drive
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle
will operate normally in first and second while in this
range.
“R” Reverse
5
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc-
ing excessive shifting and heat build up.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to
prevent brake system distress.
“D” Overdrive
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts
and best fuel economy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
“1” Low
Autostick Operation
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from 2nd to first will occur as early as possible.
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi-
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display, located in the instrument cluster.
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
ate automatically; shifting between the four available
gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transmis-
sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the Autostick mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Autostick General Information
•
•
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
•
•
•
The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only
function in third or fourth gear.
Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
•
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
5
If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in THIRD.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
2.4 Liter Turbo— If Equipped
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
5
The neutral position of the shift lever is located between
THIRD and FOURTH gear. This is the position the shifter
lever will return to automatically when neutral is se-
lected. When shifting into FIFTH gear, be sure to press
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
the shifter lever all the way to the right to avoid acciden-
tally selecting THIRD gear. Also, use care when selecting
FIRST gear to avoid accidentally selecting REVERSE.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in table 1.
TABLE 1-MANUAL TRANSAXLE NORMAL AC-
CELERATION AND CRUISE SHIFT SPEEDS
When moving the shifter lever into REVERSE press the
lever to the left until the resistance is overcome. When the
ignition switch is in the ON position, a chime will sound
to confirm that reverse has been selected and the backup
lights will illuminate.
IN mph (km/h)
EN-
GINE MODE 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
SIZE
NOTE: Listen for the audible chime to confirm RE-
VERSE gear is properly selected. Never shift into RE-
VERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Accel 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (72)
Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 42 (68) 45 (72)
2.4L
Turbo
2.4L
Non-
Turbo
Accel 15 (24) 25 (40) 33 (53) 44 (70)
Cruise 16 (26) 20 (32) 28 (45) 38 (61)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in table 2
(within legal speed limits).
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
TABLE 2-MANUAL TRANSAXLE MAXIMUM
PERFORMANCE SHIFT SPEEDS
CAUTION!
IN mph (km/h)
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
ENGINE
SIZE
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
30
(48)
60
(97)
85
(136)
115
(185)
5
2.4L
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the
engine computer. The engine will run normally when
you reduce engine speed.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
floor.
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
Parking Brake Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
5
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an acci-
dent. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
5
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
•
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
brake pedal pulsations,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
CAUTION!
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
The Traction Control System will improve acceleration
and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin.
The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at
the driving (front) wheels by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction. When this occurs the TRAC
indicator light located above the instrument cluster
odometer will flash. The system operates at speeds below
35 mph (56 km/h).
•
The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system
off;
There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
•
•
•
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC
OFF Light located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC OFF
light.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
TCS OFF Switch
A push-button at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
•
•
•
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits).
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
1. Safety—
WARNING!
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
•
•
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
5
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
•
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
•
left.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Tire Placard Location
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
5
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
WARNING!
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Radial-Ply Tires
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
5
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
5
•
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
•
Fast tire wear.
CAUTION!
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
SNOW TIRES
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
5
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L Standard Engine and 2.4L Standard Turbo
Engine
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gaso-
line will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
2.4L High Output Turbo Engine
Your engine is designed to meet all emis-
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane rating of 91. The purchase of higher
octane is not required.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
The use of high quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane rating of 91 is recommended but not required.
High quality unleaded gasoline having a minumum
octane rating of 87 may safely be used for your vehicle.
Use of these lower octane gasolines, however, may result
in reduced acceleration performance.
5
Reformulated Gasoline
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
MMT In Gasoline
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
ponents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
5
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
•
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
force open the restricting door.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
5
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indi-
cator light to turn on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer/trip odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual
for more information.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
5
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Rear Seat Occupants (convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity (sedan) . . . . . . . 865 lb (392 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity (convertible) . . . 715 lb (324 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
TRAILER TOWING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package
content.
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Class III - Heavy Duty
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
5
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note 1)
2.4L N/A and 2.4L
Turbo/Automatic*
20 Sq. Ft
1000 lbs (454 kg)
110 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L N/A and 2.4L
Turbo/Manual*
20 Sq. Ft.
1000 lbs (454 kg)
110 lbs (50 kg)
* N/A (Naturally Aspirated)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Towing Requirements
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
•
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ЉchockЉ the trailer wheels.
5
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
4 - Pin Connector
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with auto-
matic transaxle’s is not recommended.
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
Reduce speed.
wheels are off the ground.
−
Air Conditioning
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed with all four wheels on the ground, in a
forward direction, at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in neutral.
Turn off temporarily.
−
refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Hazard Warning Switch
The flasher switch is located on the instrument
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear
directional signals will flash. Depress the
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off.
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING!
•
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To re-
move or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
6
Jack Location
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Lowering Spare Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
WARNING!
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
CAUTION!
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
•
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
Jacking Instructions
3. There are two front jacking locations on each side of
the body and rear jacking locations located on the trailing
arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol. Turn
the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be
changed.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
lined up before pushing it on to the wheel.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
6
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
crossmember below the radiator, on the front sus-
pension crossmember, or on the rear axle assembly.
Jacking Locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
WARNING!
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
10. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
6
WARNING!
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow this procedure carefully.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output that exceeds
12 volts.
6
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
Traction
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WARNING!
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
6
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55km/h).
Manual Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed if the gearshift lever is in
NEUTRAL. If the transaxle is not operative, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transaxles
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi-
tion, not in the LOCK positions.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in neutral.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-
matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
CONVERTIBLE TOP MANUAL OVERRIDE
If your vehicle is experiencing electrical failure (low
battery, etc.) and it is necessary to raise the convertible
top, perform the following steps:
1. Locate the convertible top motor bypass screw, which
is found in the trunk under the convertible top storage
area.
2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the screw stops.
This will relieve the hydraulic pressure and allow the
convertible top to be raised manually.
6
Bleeder Screw
3. Using the latch handle raise the top until the two pins
seat themselves in the windshield header.
4. Rotate the latch handle clockwise to open the latches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Pull down and rotate the handle counterclockwise to
engage the latches.
6. Raise the handle into the stowed position.
7. Close the convertible top motor bypass screw by
turning the screw clockwise until it stops. Tighten the
screw securely.
NOTE: Failure to tighten the bypass screw securely can
cause convertible top operating concerns.
Engaging Convertible Top
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A gASCAP message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ЉclickingЉ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob-
lem will turn the MIL light off.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
7
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
Engine Oil
7
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “Max” mark on the engine oil dipstick
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and Go driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
•
•
•
•
Extensive engine idling.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched-
ule section of this manual.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
7
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
viscosity grade for your engine.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-
quired, see your authorized dealer for service.
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
7
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spark Plugs
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
Ignition Wiring System
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.
Catalytic Converter
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
•
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Engine Timing Belt
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described
in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
Crankcase Emission Control System
7
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
NOTE: For vehicles with a Turbo engine, a small
amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is
normal. The amount will depend on driving style. The air
cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make-up-
air filter element should be installed during the normal
air filter maintenance procedure.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
CAUTION!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the
battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides bat-
tery heat protection and will extend overall battery
life. Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
7
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery
damage can result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
WARNING!
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid types.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-
ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Windshield Wiper Blades
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze).
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
Adding Coolant
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
7
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau-
tion. Never add coolant when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build
up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
Points To Remember
•
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
7
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Fuel System Connections
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake System
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Section.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
Brake, Power Steering and Oil Cooler System
Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
lar attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
7
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done when-
ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
WARNING!
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-
longed braking. You could have an accident.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
Automatic Transaxle
All front wheel drive vehicles have a transmission and
differential assembly contained within a single housing.
7
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be
maintained at the prescribed level using the recom-
mended fluid.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and of the fluid.
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for at
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Depress the brake pedal and place the gear selector
momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever
in P (PARK).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 24 km (15 miles). The fluid cannot be
comfortable held between the finger tips. Warm is when
the fluid is between 85° to 125°F (29° to 52°C).
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
seated properly.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
If the fluid is hot, reading should be in the cross hatched
area marked “HOT” between the upper two holes in the
dipstick.
Maintenance schedule “A”—Non Turbo Charged En-
gines – No change necessary.
If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between the
lower two holes, into the area marked “LOW”.
7
Maintenance schedule “A”—Turbo Charged Engines –
No change necessary.
If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmission
fluid to bring to the proper level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance schedule “B”—All Engines – Every 60,000
miles (100 000 km) change fluid and filter under the
following conditions:
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct fluid type.
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Fluid Level Check
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-
nance schedules.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). ATF is an engi-
neered product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
Frequency Of Fluid Change
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
•
The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
•
If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
7
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
CAUTION!
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
•
•
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
•
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
•
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
•
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-purpose
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
Interior Care
WARNING!
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
7
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Washing
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
CAUTION!
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Avoid high pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
Dry with a soft tissue.
CONVERTIBLE TOP CARE
General Cleaning
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful
in removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in
partial shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle
before washing the top. The top should be washed with
a soft, natural bristle scrub brush, and Mopar Car Wash
or a mild soap solution. Do not use detergent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
Cloth Top Additional Cleaning Procedure
CAUTION!
For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn
stains, apply Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner (part
number 05012245AA) to the complete stain, extending 2
inches (50 mm) beyond the stain. With a soft bristle
brush, scrub in all directions over the stain. Avoid heavy
scrubbing. Rinse the area with warm water. If the stain is
still apparent, repeat the cleaning procedure. When the
stain is no longer showing, rinse the complete top with
warm water. Let the top dry before lowering it. 7
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches.
Cleaners should not contain silicones, organic sol-
vents, petroleum distillates or plasticizers. always
wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering
it into the storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings
may be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains
persist, contact your local dealership for further sugges-
tions.
Cloth Top Protection
For appearance purposes, you may wish to protect your
Twillfast™ (cloth) top periodically. Use Mopar Convert-
ible Cloth Top Treatment or a fabric protectant such as
Scotchguard_ is suggested. The top should be clean and
dry before application of the protectant.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
CAUTION!
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside
of the cover.
Avoid getting Scotchguard_ on the surrounding
weather strips, moldings, paint, or glass. Damage to
these items might occur.
Weather Strip Care
Lubricate all top and door glass weather strips periodi-
cally with Mopar Weather Strip Lubricant (part number
4773427), to keep them soft and pliable.
Integrated Power Module Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Power Top Feed
AWD ECU Feed
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Power Seats
1
40 Amp
Green
9
40 Amp
Green
2
3
4
5
6
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
CCN, Power Locks
Power Outlet
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
Ignition Switch Feed
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
Trailer Tow
Pwr run/Acc Outlet
RR
IOD CCN/ Interior
Lighting
RAD Fan Relay Bat-
tery Feed
IGN Run/Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
10 Amp
Red
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Ocm Steering Cntrl
Sdar/Hfm
10 Amp
Red
7
50 Amp
Red
7
8
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense1
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
IOD Sense2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
17
10 Amp
Red
IOD Feed CVT Mod/
Mod_Wcm
25
10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirror
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
26
27
28
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
EMPTY
20 Amp
Yelow
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
25 Amp
Natural
IOD Feed Radio
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren
IGN RUN Hvac/
Compass Sensor
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
PWR Sunroof Feed
29
30
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Heated Seats
31
32
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
30 Amp
Pink
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
CAUTION!
•
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
failure.
33
10 Amp
Red
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
ABS Valve Feed
34
35
36
37
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
ABS Pump Feed
Headlamp Washer
Control
Spare
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
25 Amp
Natural
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
•
Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006XS
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005XS
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAKX
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
(Convertible) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Rear Tail/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157-P27/7W
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
•
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside
Bulb No.
Center Console Floor Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37
Climate Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6233137
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194
Dome Light (sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579
Dome Light / Sport Bar Lights (convertible) . . . . T904
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Overhead Reading Light (Overhead Console) . . . T1037
Overhead Reading Light (Rearview Mirror) . . . . . T192
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten
bulb life.
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and
replace the bulb.
7
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog light.
2. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn to replace
and replace the bulb.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Tail/Stop, and Rear Turn Signal Lights
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/4 turn to remove it from the
housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
Back Up Lights
7
Removing Backup Light Bulbs
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially ЉpopЉ out to
the secondary catch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
completely.
Center High Mounted Stop Light
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
3. Remove the socket from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
15 Gallons
56.7 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.4 Liter Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil.
Cooling System *
5.0 qts
6.5 qts
4.7 Liters
6.2 Liters
2.4 Liter Engines (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Miles Formula), or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Non Turbo—Mopar 4105409AB or equiv. Turbo—Mopar 4781452BB or equiv.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection
91 Octane for High Output 2.4L Turbo and 87 Octane for 2.4L Standard
Turbo and 2.4L Standard Non Turbo Engines.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir
Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or MoparATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
There are three maintenance schedules that show re-
quired service for your vehicle.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”—ALL ENGINES. It is for vehicles
that are operated under the conditions that are listed
below and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part, which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
S
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.†छ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†छ
Second is Schedule “A”—NON TURBO. It is for vehicles
that are not operated under any of the conditions listed
under Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
N
T
E
•
•
Off-road or desert operation.
N
A
N
C
E
Third is Schedule “A”—TURBO. It is for vehicles that are
not operated under any of the conditions listed under
Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
CAUTION!
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ЉMaintenance Sched-
ulesЉ section of this manual.
E
S
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
N
T
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
N
A
N
C
E
At Each Oil Change
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
S
C
H
E
Once a Month
D
U
L
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
nents.
E
S
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
•
Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.
8
Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug
condition.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 411
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Follow schedule “B”—All Engines if you usually operate
your vehicle under one or more of the following condi-
tions.
•
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
N
T
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C ).
E
N
A
N
C
E
•
•
Trailer towing.†छ
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an छ.
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†छ
S
C
H
E
•
•
Off-road or desert operation.
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles (80
000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one or
more of the conditions marked with an †.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
D
U
L
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
E
•
•
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
8
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
412 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ЉMaintenance Sched-
ulesЉ section of this manual.
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched-
ule section of this manual.
N
T
E
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
N
A
N
C
E
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 413
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
(30 000)
X
N
T
(10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as nec-
essary.
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
414 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as neces-
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(60 000)
X
N
T
(35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
sary.*
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 415
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
39,000
42,000
45,000
48,000
51,000
54,000
(90 000)
X
N
T
(65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
Inspect the Make-up air filter. Replace as nec-
essary.
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
416 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
( Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
57,000
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
72,000
N
T
(95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces-
sary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and fil-
ter.छ
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
X
X
E
S
8
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 417
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and re-
place as necessary.*
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
N
T
(125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces-
sary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
E
X
S
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as nec-
essary.
8
X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
418 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for trailer
towing.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
Replace the engine timing belt. *
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced
at 60 months.
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
93,000
(155 000)
X
96,000
(160 000)
X
99,000
(165 000)
X
102,000
(170 000)
X
105,000
(175 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 419
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
108,000
(180 000)
X
111,000
(185 000)
X
114,000
(190 000)
X
117,000
(195 000)
X
120,000
(200 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter.छ
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
420 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
123,000
(205 000)
X
126,000
(210 000)
X
129,000
(215 000)
X
132,000
(220 000)
X
135,000
(225 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 421
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
Rotate tires.
138,000
(230 000)
X
141,000
(235 000)
X
144,000
(240 000)
X
147,000
(245 000)
X
150,000
(250 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
छ This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
E
S
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
8
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
422 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
E
(10 000)
(20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[6]
X
[12]
X
[18]
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 423
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months, if
not done at 102,000 miles.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
54,000
60,000
66,000
N
T
(90 000)
(100 000) (110 000)
E
[54]
X
[60]
X
[66]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
X
8
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
424 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Replace the engine timing belt. *
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
N
T
(120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
E
[72]
X
X
[78]
X
X
[84]
X
X
[90]
X
X
X
X
[96]
X
X
[102]
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
X
X
8
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not re-
placed at 60 months.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 425
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
N
T
(180 000) (190 000) (200 000) (210 000) (220 000) (230 000)
E
[108]
X
X
[114]
X
X
[120]
X
X
[126]
X
[132]
X
[138]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
‡
S
C
H
E
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
426 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
144,000
(240 000)
[144]
X
150,000
(250 000)
[150]
X
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡
Replace the air cleaner filter.
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 427
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
5,000
(8 000)
[6]
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
E
(16 000) (24 000) (32 000) (40 000) (48 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[12]
X
X
[18]
X
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
428 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
35,000
(56 000)
[42]
40,000
(64 000)
[48]
X
X
45,000
(72 000)
[54]
50,000
(80 000)
[60]
55,000
(88 000)
[66]
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not
replaced at 100,000 miles.
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 429
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
60,000
65,000
70,000
75,000
80,000
85,000
N
T
(96 000) (104 000) (112 000) (120 000) (128 000) (136 000)
E
[72]
X
X
X
X
[78]
X
X
[84]
X
X
[90]
X
[96]
X
[102]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
E
X
X
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
430 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if
previously changed. * ‡
Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Replace the engine timing belt.
90,000
(144 000)
[108]
X
95,000
100,000
105,000
N
T
(156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
[114]
X
E
[120]
X
X
[126]
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
E
S
X
X
8
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 431
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Month]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
110,000
(177 000)
[132]
X
115,000
(185 000)
[138]
X
120,000
(193 000)
[144]
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
WARNING!
D
U
L
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
S
8
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
•
•
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.NHTSA.gov. or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Washington DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
MOPARா PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In Canada:
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
438 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
•
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 439
Call Toll Free at:
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Treadwear
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
440 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
442 INDEX
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54,88
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 443
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293,382
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
444 INDEX
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,240,248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 445
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
446 INDEX
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,359
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,404,405
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 447
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,405
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
448 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 449
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,177
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,101,113,225
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
450 INDEX
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,225,402
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 451
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,226
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
452 INDEX
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,404
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,111
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,373
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 453
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
454 INDEX
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,85
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 455
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,373
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,400
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
456 INDEX
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,307,439
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,307
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 457
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,278,281,385
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,279,288
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
458 INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
